‫ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪3DEC‬‬

‫ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﻪﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﻌﺪﻱ ‪ UDEC‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﻨﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺻﻠﺐ‪ ١‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ‪ ٢‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺶﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ٣‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ – ﻛﺮﻧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﺧﻄﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﺧﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ – ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3DEC‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻜﺮ)ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﻨﮓ( ﻭ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ 3DEC .‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻻﮔﺮﺍﻧﮋﻱ‪ ٤‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻃﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﮕﺎﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﺮﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺨﺶ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻳﻲ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺩﺭﺑﺮﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ) ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١-Rigid‬‬
‫‪٢-Deformable‬‬
‫‪٣-Finite Difference Elements‬‬
‫‪١-Lagrangian‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ 3DEC‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺳﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮔﺴﻴﺨﺘﮕﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ‪ ٥‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺒﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﻳﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﭘﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺴﻴﺨﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ 3DEC ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺁﻳﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ( ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﺴﻠﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ)ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ( ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﺶ)ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ،Null‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﻫﺮ‪-‬ﻛﻮﻟﻤﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺩﻭﺧﻄﻲ ﻧﺮﻣﺸﺪﮔﻲ‪/‬ﺳﺨﺖ ﺷﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﻛﻮﻟﻤﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢﭘﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﻛﻮﻟﻤﺐ)ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﺢ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺯﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻭ ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢﭘﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺴﺖﺷﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺑﺮﻱ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ)ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻮﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﻜﺮﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢-Progressive failure‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ‪ FISH‬ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ FISH‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ FISH‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻙ)ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻏﻴﺮﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻭ‪ ...‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ 3DEC‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ)ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪.(FISH‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ :١‬ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪3DEC‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪3DEC‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻴﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺳﻨﮓ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻭ ﺣﻞ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ)‪ (solution explicit‬ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻲ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﮔﺴﻞ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺗﺸﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻃﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻃﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺳﻨﮓ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺳﻨﮓ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺳﻨﮓ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﺩﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻚ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﻛﻤﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻣﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﻮﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ)ﻳﺎ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ( ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﺡ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﮔﺴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﻮﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ) ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﭘﻠﻬﺎ( ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻗﻮﺳﻲ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻛﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﹰﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻙ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭﺳﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﺞ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻋﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺪﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﻝ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺫﻫﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :١‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺪﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ)ﺑﺸﺮﻁ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ(‪ .‬ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﻏﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﺸﻤﭙﻮﺷﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﻫﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﻫﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﻫﻨﻲ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ؟ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﺳ ﹰﺎ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﺏ‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﺮﺍﻥﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪﺑﻌﺪﻱ؟‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﻪﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺍﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﹰﺍ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺫﻫﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻘﺼﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :٤‬ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ)ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﭘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻨﮓ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻤﺮﺥ ﺳﺪ ﻭ ‪(...‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ)ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮔﺴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﻳﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ(‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ)ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ)ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ )ﺑﻮﻳﮋﻩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻲ( ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ)ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻡ( ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻨﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﻭ ﺻﺤﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :٥‬ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪-١‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ)ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﺶ( ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :٦‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﺤﺖ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :٧‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪3DEC‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ 3DEC.exe‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫‪ DOS‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ‪ version‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ١٦‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ RAM‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ 3DEC.exe‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ properties‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ target‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ok‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻲﺑﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ dat‬ﻭ ‪txt‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪call c:\…\filename.dat‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺪﻟﻲ ﺳﻪﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺭﻕ)ﻓﻮﻟﻴﺎﺳﻴﻮﻥ( ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ :١‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻪﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ poly brick‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪poly brick xi,xu yi,yu zi,zu‬‬

‫‪poly brick 0,80 0,50 -30,80‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ x‬ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨٠‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ y‬ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ z‬ﺍﺯ ‪ -٣٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ plot‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ x-y‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ ،3DEC‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﭼﭙﮕﺮﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ z‬ﺑﺴﻮﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍﻳﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ jset‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪jset dip a dd b origin x y z‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ dip‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ y=0‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ dd .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ z‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ origin .(٢‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ :٢‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫‪jset dip 90 dd 180 origin 0,0,0‬‬

‫‪jset dip 90 dd 180 origin 0,0,50‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻱ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ hide‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪hide x1 x2 y1 y2 z1 z2‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪free, fix, join, gen, mark, change, delete, jset‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪hide 0,80 0,50 -30,0‬‬

‫‪hide 0,80 0,50 50,80‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ find‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ seek‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪find x1 x2 y1 y2 z1 z2‬‬
‫‪seek x1 x2 y1 y2 z1 z2‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ‪ region number‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ mark‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻼ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫‪mark x1 x2 y1 y2 z1 z2 region n‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ n‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪find, hide, gen, change, delete,‬‬
‫‪ jset, fill, excavate‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬‬
‫‪mark region 1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ ١‬ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ jset‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪jset dip 2.45 dd 235 or 30,12.5,0‬‬

‫‪jset dip 2.45 dd 315 or 35,30,0‬‬

‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ jset‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺯﻫﺎ)‪ (num‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ)‪ (spacing‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪jset dip a dd b origin x y z num n spacing s persistence p‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ origin‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ persistence‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ p=0.5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ٥٠%‬ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺠﺰ ‪ per‬ﻭ‪ ، num‬ﻫﺮﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ per‬ﻭ‪ num‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ١‬ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺭﻕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪jset dip 76 dd 270 spac 4 num 5 org 38,12.5,0‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺩﺭﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ ٧٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ ٢٧٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ )‪ (38,12.5,0‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻒ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ ٢‬ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪hide 30,80 0,50 0,50‬‬
‫‪jset dip 0 dd 0 or 0 10 0‬‬
‫‪hide 0 80 0 10 -30 80‬‬
‫‪mark region 2‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺣﺎﻃﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪seek‬‬
‫‪hide region 0‬‬
‫‪hide 0 80 0 10 0 50‬‬
‫‪hide 55,80 0,50 0,50‬‬
‫‪hide 0,30 0,50 0,50‬‬
‫‪jset dip 70 dd 200 or 0 0 35‬‬
‫‪jset dip 60 dd 330 or 50 50 15‬‬

‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬‬
‫‪seek‬‬
‫‪hide region 0 , 2‬‬
‫‪plot‬‬

‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎ)ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ( ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ fix‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎ ‪fix x1 x2 y1 y2 z1 z2‬‬

‫‪fix region n‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ)ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ‪(n‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪seek‬‬
‫‪fix 0 80 0 10 0 50‬‬
‫‪fix 55 80 0 50 0 50‬‬
‫‪fix region 0‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ delete‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪delete x1 x2 y1 y2 z1 z2‬‬
‫‪del region n‬‬

‫‪hide region 0‬‬

‫‪delete region 2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ gravity‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪gravity gx gy gz‬‬

‫ﻫﺮﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﻘﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪gravity 0 -10 0‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺛﻘﻞ ‪ ١٠m/s2‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ property‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪prop mat=n ...‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ)ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺑﻜﺮ(‬
‫‪prop jmat=n ...‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ mat=n‬ﻭ ‪ jmat=n‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ change‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ‪ (n=50) ٥٠‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫… ‪change <range> mat=n‬‬
‫… ‪change <range> jmat=n‬‬

‫‪10‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪prop mat 1 dens 2000‬‬

‫‪prop jmat 1 kn 1e9 ks 1e9 fric 89‬‬
‫‪prop jmat 2 kn 1e9 ks 1e9 fric 0‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ‪ ٢٠٠٠kg/m3‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺳﺨﺘﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ)‪ (kn‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ)‪ (ks‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ ٨٩‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ ٩٠‬ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪change dip 90 dd 180 jmat 2‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻀﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ)ﺑﻪ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ( ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺷﺎﺧﺼﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ hist‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪hist <ncyc n> keyword‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ‪ n‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺤﭽﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ)‪ ،(s1, s2, s3‬ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫)‪ ،(sxx, syy, szz, ...‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ)‪ ،(xdisp, ydisp, zdisp‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ)‪ (xvel, yvel, zvel‬ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ)‪.(unbal‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ y‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ )‪ (٣٠،٣٠،٣٠‬ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪hist yvel 30 30 30 type 1‬‬
‫‪hist unbal‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ type n‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ hist‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ step‬ﻳﺎ ‪ cycle‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪step n‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪cycle n‬‬

‫‪step 500‬‬

‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ y‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ‪ hist‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ print hist n‬ﻛﻪ ‪ n‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ hist‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺳﻮﺩﻣﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ save‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪save c:\…\filename.sav‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ restore‬ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪restore c:\…\filename.sav‬‬

‫ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺑﻪ ‪ ٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪prop jmat 1 fric 6‬‬
‫‪cycle 2000‬‬
‫‪hide region 0‬‬
‫‪plot region 2 dip 70 dd 210 mag 2‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺭﻕ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪plot xsec dip 90 dd 180 mag 3 wire disp‬‬

‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪3DEC‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ :3DEC‬ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻙ)‪ :(block‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮕﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺠﺰﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ)‪ :(contact‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺰ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ)‪ :(sub-contact‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﻳﺰﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺰﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ)‪ :(discontinuity‬ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﺴﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ)‪ :(zone‬ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻬﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺶ‪/‬ﻛﺮﻧﺶ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ)‪ :(grid point, nodal point‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ)ﮔﺮﻫﻬﺎ( ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﭼﻨﺪﻭﺟﻬﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ)‪ :(model boundary‬ﻣﺮﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ 3DEC‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ( ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ)‪ :(boundary condition‬ﺷﺮﻁ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺻﻔﺮ)‪ :(null block‬ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺣﻔﺮﺍﺕ)ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ)ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ (del‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ)‪ :(block constitutive model‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ)ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ( ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ)‪ :(joint constitutive model‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ)ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺭﻳﺰﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ( ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﻛﻮﻟﻤﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ)‪ :(structural element‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ( ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺳﻨﮓ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ)‪ :(step‬ﺣﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﻞ ‪ 3DEC‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﮔﺎﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ)ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ( ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ step‬ﻳﺎ ‪ cycle‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ)‪ :(static solution‬ﺣﻞ)ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ( ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ)ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ)‪ :(unbalanced force‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ)ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ( ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 3DEC‬ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ)ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ( ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬

‫‪13‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ١MN‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪ ١٠٠N‬ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻨﮓ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ)‪ :(dynamic solution‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺣﻞ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺸﺒﺎﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪3DEC‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺳﻪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺰﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪-١‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻏﺘﺸﺎﺵ)ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ( ﺩﻳﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ)ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ)ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ( ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻲ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣‬ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪14‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ :٣‬ﺭﻭﻳﻪ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪3DEC‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻬﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﮊﺋﻮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﻳﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ( ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻧﻠﻬﺎ( ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ‪ x,y,z‬ﺭﺋﻮﺱ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺷﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ)ﺷﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻴﺐ( ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪)3DEC‬ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺋﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ( ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬

‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ print‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ print‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬

‫‪print block, print contact, print vertex, print zone location, print contact location‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻲ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪poly brick x1 x2 y1 y2 z1 z2‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ )‪ (y1 , y2) ،(x1 , x2‬ﻭ )‪ (z1 ,z2‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ‪ z, y, x‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ poly prism‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ poly brick‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭼﻨﺪﻭﺟﻬﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻮﺱ ﻣﻨﺸﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ)‪ (face a‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻮﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺩﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ)‪ (face b‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫&… ‪poly a x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3‬‬

‫… ‪b x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻬﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Poly face‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﭼﻨﺪﻭﺟﻬﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻮﺱ)ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎ( ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻮﺱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮﺩ)ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ( ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻬﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫&… ‪Poly face x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3‬‬

‫&… ‪face x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻭﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ poly tunnel‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪poly tunnel radius a length l1 l2 nx n nt n nr n ratr a rmul a dip a dd a origin x y z‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻭﺍﮊﻩ ‪ ،radius‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺍﺀ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ)‪ ،(origin‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻭﺍﮊﻩ ‪ length‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ)ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ(‪ .‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ )‪ (l2-l1‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻭﺍﮊﻩ ‪ nx‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻭﺍﮊﻩ ‪nt‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ)ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ nx‬ﻭ ‪ nt‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ)ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ‪ ratr=a‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ a .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ‪rmul‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺐ)‪ (dip‬ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬

‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ)‪ (dd‬ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ)ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ( ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻭﺍﮊﻩ ‪ origin‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ join‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‬

‫‪Join <range> on/off‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ)‪ (on‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ)‪ (off‬ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ)ﺩﺭﺯﻩ( ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ jset‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪jset dip a dd b origin x y z num n spacing s persistence p‬‬

‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ jset‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ tunnel‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ)ﺗﻮﻧﻞ( ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫& … ‪tunnel region n a x1,y1,z1 x2,y2,z2 x3,y3,z3‬‬

‫… ‪b x1,y1,z1 x2,y2,z2 x3,y3,z3‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ (b‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻮﺱ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺋﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ‪ region‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﮋﻩﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬

‫ﻣﺶﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻨﺶ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪gen <range> edge ν‬‬
‫‪gen <range> quad ndiv i1 i2 i3‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﮔﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺶ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻬﻲ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ gen edge ν‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ν‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ gen quad‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺶﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻳﺰﺵ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺶ ﻭﺟﻬﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺣﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ gen edge‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﺭﺁﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ gen quad‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ gen edge‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ gen center‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺸﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺸﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻣﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻣﺶ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺶ)ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻬﻲ( ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٥:١‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﭘﺮﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺶ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٤:١‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ)ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ jset‬ﻭ ‪ (join‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺶﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ٥ ،3DEC‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ‪،null‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻫﺮ‪-‬ﻛﻮﻟﻤﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺷﺪﮔﻲ‪/‬ﻧﺮﻡﺷﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺿﺮ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ change cons‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪change <range> cons n‬‬

‫‪excavation‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻝ‪null‬‬
‫‪change cons 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫‪change cons 2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻫﺮ‪-‬ﻛﻮﻟﻤﺐ‬
‫‪change cons 3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫‪change cons 6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺷﺪﮔﻲ‪/‬ﻧﺮﻡﺷﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ null‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ >‪ excavation <range‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ fill‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ delete‬ﻳﺎ ‪ remove‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪property‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ change‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬‬
‫‪change <range> mat n‬‬

‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ :‬ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻚ)‪ (K‬ﻭ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ)‪ .(G‬ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﺎﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﭘﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬
‫=‪K‬‬ ‫=‪G‬‬
‫) ‪3(1 − 2ν‬‬ ‫) ‪2(1 + ν‬‬

‫‪prop mat n bulk(or k) value g(or s) value dens value‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻮﻫﺮ‪-‬ﻛﻮﻟﻤﺐ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫& ‪prop mat n bulk(or k) value g(or s) value dens value bcohesion value btension value phi value‬‬
‫‪psi value‬‬

‫)‪ bulk(or k‬ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻚ‪ g(or s) ،‬ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‪ dens ،‬ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ‪ bcohesion ،‬ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﻲ‪ btension ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺸﺸﻲ‪ phi ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ‪ psi ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪ ‪ ١٤‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺷﺪﮔﻲ‪/‬ﻧﺮﻡﺷﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﻛﻮﻟﻤﺐ)ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﻄﺢ( ﻭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ)ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ .(٢‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ change jcons‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪change <range> jcons n‬‬

‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ property jmat‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ change‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪change <range> jmat n‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﻛﻮﻟﻤﺐ)‪ (jcons=1,2‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ :‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ‪.‬‬

‫& ‪Prop jmat n cohesion value dilation value friction value kn value ks value‬‬
‫‪tensil value zdilation value‬‬

‫‪ cohesion‬ﭼﺴﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ dilation ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ friction ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ kn ،‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ks‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ tensil ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ zdilation ،‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺻﻔﺮ‬

‫‪19‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ)‪ (jcons=7‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢﭘﺬﻳﺮ)‪ (jcons=3‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫& ‪Prop jmat n friction value kn value ks value en value es value if value r value maxkn value‬‬
‫‪maxks value minkn value minks value‬‬

‫‪ en‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ)ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ))‬
‫‪ es ،((kn(σnen‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ if ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ r ،‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﺯﺑﺮﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ maxkn ،‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ maxks‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ‪ minkn ،‬ﻭ ‪ minks‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺯﻩ)ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺨﺘﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺨﺘﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ‪ es‬ﻭ ‪ en‬ﺍﺛﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪3DEC‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ)ﺑﺮﺟﺎ( ﻭ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺷﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺶﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺶﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ boundary‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺶ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ)ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ( ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ‬
‫ﺻﻠﺐ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ)ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ free, fix‬ﻭ ‪ apply‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ٣‬ﺧﻼﺻﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪20‬‬
 ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ :٣‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ‬

‫‪boundary <range> keyword value‬‬

‫‪fix range‬‬
‫‪free range‬‬
‫‪apply <range> keyword value‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ)ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ( ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ)ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ( ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ insitu‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫& ‪insitu <range> stress sxxo syyo szzo sxyo sxzo syzo‬‬
‫& ‪xgrad sxxx syyx szzx sxyx sxzx syzx‬‬
‫& ‪ygrad sxxy syyy szzy sxyy sxzy syzy‬‬
‫‪zgrad sxxz syyz szzz sxyz sxzz syzz‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ‪ sxxo syyo szzo sxyo sxzo syzo‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ygrad ،xgrad‬ﻭ ‪ zgrad‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Sxx=sxxo+(sxxx)x+(sxxy)y+(sxxz)z‬‬
‫‪Syy=syyo+(syyx)x+(syyy)y+(syyz)z‬‬
‫‪Szz=szzo+(szzx)x+(szzy)y+(szzz)z‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ jcons ،jmat‬ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ insitu‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ)ﺗﻨﺶ ﺛﻘﻠﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪21‬‬
‫‪gravity gx gy gz‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢﭘﻮﺷﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ insitu‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﺑﻮﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ(‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ cycle‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ step‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ hist‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ >‪ delete <range>, remove<range‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ >‪ excavate <range‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ‪ boundary xload, yload, zload, stress‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ‪ boundary xvel, yvel, zvel‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎ)ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ‪ boundary xfree, yfree, zfree‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ change cons, jcons‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ prop mat, jmat‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻬﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﮊﺋﻮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺳﻨﮓ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺗﻜﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ‪ local‬ﻭ ‪ global‬ﺩﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ‪ local‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ global‬ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺳﻨﮓ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ global‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺳﻨﮓ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻮﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺴﺐ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻛﺸﺶ) ﻛﺸﺶ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺑﺨﺶ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ( ﻭ ﺑﺮﺵ)ﺑﺮﺵ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﺩﺭﺯﻩ( ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ local‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﻧﺪﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ global‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ structure‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ local‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪struct axial x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 prop np‬‬

‫‪ x1, x2,...‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪struct prop np rkax value rlen value rsstrain value rstrain value rult value‬‬

‫‪ rkax‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ)ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ‪/‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭ(‪ rlen ،‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ rsstrain ،‬ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﮔﺴﻴﺨﺖ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‪،‬‬
‫‪ rstrain‬ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﮔﺴﻴﺨﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ‪ rult ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ)ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ)‪ (pull-out test‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ)‪ (Ka‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪K a = πKd 1‬‬
‫‪0.5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪K =  G g Eb /( d 2 / d1 − 1)‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ d1‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ Gg ،‬ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ‪ Eb ،‬ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﺎﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ d2 ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﮔﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ)‪ (ultimate anchorage strength‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ)‪.(pult‬‬
‫‪pult = 0.1σ cπd 2 L‬‬
‫‪ σ c‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺳﻨﮓ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪)٤٢ MPa‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ‬
‫‪٤٢ MPa‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﻭ ‪ L‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ)‪ (bond‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ)‪ (Ks‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪K s = Eb Iβ 3‬‬
‫]) ‪β = [K /( 4 Eb I‬‬
‫‪1/ 4‬‬

‫)‪K = 2 E g /( d 2 / d 1 − 1‬‬
‫‪ I‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ Eg‬ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﺎﻧﮓ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ‪ ρ max‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪e − βl = ρ max‬‬

‫‪23‬‬
 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ :٤‬ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ،global‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ)‪ (cable‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ)ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ( ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪struct cable x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 seg ns prop n ten t‬‬

‫‪ x1, x2,...‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ seg .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﮕﻤﻨﺘﻬﺎ)ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ prop .‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ‪ ten‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺶﺗﻨﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Struct prop n area value e value kbond value sbond value yield value‬‬

‫‪ area‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ e ،‬ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﺎﻧﮓ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ kbond ،‬ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ‪ sbond ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ)ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ‪/‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭ(‬
‫ﻭ ‪ yield‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ)ﻧﻴﺮﻭ(ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‪-‬ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻮﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ‪ ، u ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ‪ ،f‬ﺑﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ‪kbond‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪F=kbond*u‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ‪ kbond‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ)‪ (pull-out test‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪24‬‬
 ‫‪2πG‬‬
‫≤ ‪Kbond‬‬
‫‪ 2t ‬‬
‫‪ln1 + ‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ t‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ‪ G ،‬ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﻭ ‪ D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻧﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ kbond‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪2πG‬‬
‫= ‪Kbond‬‬
‫‪ 2t ‬‬
‫‪10 ln1 + ‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ )‪ (bond strength of grout‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Sbond = π ( D + 2t )τ peak‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ τ peak‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪τ peak = τ I .QB‬‬
‫‪ : τ I‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ)ﻫﺮﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ( ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : QB‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ)ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ( ‪ Q B = 1‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﺭﺥ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ sbond‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫)‪ (D+2t‬ﺑﺎ )‪ (D‬ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺍﻱ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳﻨﻴﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ structural liner‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ config liner‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ‪ liner‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫& >‪struct <range> liner x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 seg na,nr prop n <range r> <begin xb yb zb‬‬
‫>‪<end xe ye ze> <connect‬‬

‫‪ x1, x2,...‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ liner‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ nr .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ‪ liner‬ﻭ ‪ na‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ liner‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ prop n .‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ‪ liner‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ range r .‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ r‬ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪ liner‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪connect .‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ liner‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ)ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ( ‪ begin‬ﻭ ‪ end‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ‪ liner‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ :٥‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ liner‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ :٤‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ‪ :‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺶ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺶ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﻧﺶ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻣﻨﻔﺬﻱ‪ :‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻴﺐ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ z‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ x-z‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ x-z‬ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ z‬ﺩﺭﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ :٥‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺩﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﭼﭙﮕﺮﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪y‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ z‬ﺑﺴﻮﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ)ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺡ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ ﻭ ‪(...‬‬ ‫‪-١‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ)ﮔﺴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪(....‬‬ ‫‪-٢‬‬

‫‪27‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﺭﭼﻮﺏ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ 3DEC‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻧﻞ ﻭ ‪ .(...‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮﻧﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺪﻝ‬

‫ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺳﻨﮓ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻪﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ)ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭ( ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﺎﺭﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻃﻲ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ :٦‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺗﻨﺶ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪) print brick x1 x2 y1 y2 z1 z2‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪x1,‬‬
‫‪ x2,y1,...‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ( ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ)ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ set log on‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ log‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ‬

‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ( ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ TRANS.EXE‬ﺩﺭ ‪ 3DEC‬ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ)ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪C:\Itasca\3DEC\TUTORIAL\Solving‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺟﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ z‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ‪ x, y, z‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ TRANS.REC‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪29‬‬